‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ‬

‫)ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ(‬

‫ﲝﺚ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )‪(s.s‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪103021027393 :‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫‪2007‬ﻡ‪1428/‬ھ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ‬

‫)ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ(‬

‫ﲝﺚ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )‪(s.s‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪103021027393 :‬‬

‫ﲢﺖ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻮﻃﻲ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﺎﺳﻮﺗﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ(‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫‪2008‬ﻡ‪1428/‬ﻫ‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺻﺮﺣﺖ ﺑﺄﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪-‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﺩﻭﻥ‬

‫ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﻓﺄﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﺘﻠﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻗﺮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﷲ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪ 2 ،‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪2008‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎ ﺱ‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﲡﺮﻳﺪ‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺧﻄﺔ ﰱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ‬

‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﰱ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﻩ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻤﺪ ﷲ ﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﲔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻠﻬﻢ ﺻﻞ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﺪﻧﺎ ﻭﻣﻮﻻﻧﺎ‬

‫ﳏﻤﺪ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﻨﻮﺭﻩ ﰱ ﶈﺔ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺳﻌﻪ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﷲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺣﺴﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻘﻪ ﲤﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻁ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﰱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻭﺃﻋﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲤﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺝ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳋﲑ‬

‫ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻧﺪﻭﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﻧﺞ ﺃﺳﺪﺍﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻀﻴﻠﺔ ﺳﻜﺮﺗﲑ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﺑﲑ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻮﻃﻰ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﺎﺳﻮﺗﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻗﺎﻡ‬

‫ﲟﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺗﺬ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ‬
‫ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ ﺃﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﻮﻧﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﷲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻤﻼ ﻧﺎﻓﻌﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﲑ‪2008 ،‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺱ‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻑ ‪ ..................................................‬ﺃ‬

‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ ..................................................‬ﺏ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ ..............................‬ﺝ‬

‫ﲡﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ......................... ................................‬ﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ‪ .................... ................................‬ھ‬

‫ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ .................................................‬ﻭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪1 ............................................‬‬

‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ‪1 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ‪6 ......................................‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪﻩ ‪7 ................................‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪7 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ھ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪8 .......................................‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ‪ :‬ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪10 ..........................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪10 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ ‪11 ......................................‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪12 .......................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻭﺃﺭﺁﺋﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪26 ...............................................‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ‪26 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪29 ................................‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ ‪37 ....................................‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪40 ................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪59 ........................................‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ‪59 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ‪61 .......................................‬‬

‫ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ‪61 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ ‪66 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﺎﲤﺔ ‪76 .......................................‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪76 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ‪79 ............................................‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺃﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺻﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻃﻘﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰱ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻺﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﲔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﰱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﻔﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﴰﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ "ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﻌﱪ ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺿﻬﻢ‪".‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺎ‬

‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻮﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻳﺘﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺳ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺪ ﻓ‪‬ﻰ ﺍﻟﹾﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫‪1‬ﺃﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻳﻊ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ‪) ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪،‬‬

‫ﺹ ‪.13‬‬

‫‪2‬ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺭ‪) ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪1952 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻁ ‪ ،2‬ﺝ ‪،1‬‬

‫ﺹ ‪.33‬‬
‫‪12‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺪ ﰱ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻰ‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﰱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‪،‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻫﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬

‫ﻳﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻒ ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﲣﻀﻊ ﳍﺎ‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﰱ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﻤﻞ‪".‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﻋﲏ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ‬

‫ﺍﳍﺠﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫‪3‬ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﳒﻰ‪،‬‬

‫‪1988‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻁ ‪ ،3‬ﺹ ‪13‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎ ﻭﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻵﺫﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻦ ﺃﲪﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻫﻴﺪ )‪170-100‬ﻫـ‪791-719 /‬ﻡ( ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻣﻌﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺧﺬ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻛﺴﻴﺒﻮﻳﻪ )‪188-125‬ﻫـ‪801-843/‬ﻡ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺻﻒ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ" ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﻏﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬

‫)‪392-330‬ﻫـ‪1002-942/‬ﻡ( ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼ ﰱ ﻋﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ "ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﺎ )‪428-380‬ﻫـ‪-980/‬‬

‫‪1003‬ﻡ( ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﺻﻨﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﲰﻬﺎ "ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﳐﺸﺮﻯ )‪538-467‬ﻫـ‪1132-1062/‬ﻡ( ﺍﻟﺬﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬

‫)‪626-554‬ﻫـ‪1221-1149/‬ﻡ( ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ"‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺒﻮﻳﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﻢ‬

‫ﻳﺮﺩﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﻫﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﳎﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻣﺎﺀ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ" ﲟﺠﻠﺔ ﳎﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺌﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻱ‪1963 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩ ﻁ‪ ،‬ﺝ ‪ ،15‬ﺹ ‪43‬‬
‫‪14‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻒ ﳎﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺯﻋﻤﺎﺀﻫﻢ ﻭﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ‬

‫"ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ" ﻓﻴﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻧﺎﺗﻴﻚ"‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ" ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺃﻳﻮﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ‬

‫"ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﲪﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ"‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ" ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ"‬

‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺟﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﰱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰱ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻣﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﶈﺪﺛﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰱ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬

‫ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ" ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ " ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﰱ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﰱ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﻌﺎﱏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻻﻳﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ‬

‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻯ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ "ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ‬

‫ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ" )ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ(‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪،‬‬

‫ﳚﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫‪16‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳎﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ؟‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺭﺁﺋﻬﻤﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ؟‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ؟‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻬﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﺁﺀ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻬﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﰱ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﱮ ﲝﻴﺚ ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﺭﺁﺀ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭﺓ ﰱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺃﺻﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ ‪.2007‬‬

‫ﻫ‪ -‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺴﺔ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ ‪ :‬ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲰﻪ ﻭﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺍﲰﻪ ﻭﻧﺸﺄﺑﻪ ﻭﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﲤﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ‬

‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬

‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ ﺃﻧﻪ "ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺪﺭﻙ ﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺪﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻬﻬﺎ‪5"،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﺪﺭﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬

‫ﻭﻻﻳﺬﻭﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻻﳝﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻪ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﺑﻞ ﻳﺪﺭﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬

‫ﻋﺮﻓﻪ ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ "ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺮﺩﺓ‬

‫ﺣﱴ ﻭﻟﻮﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎ ﺣﻴﺎ‪ 6".‬ﻓﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺲ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱏ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺷﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻚ ﺟﺴﻢ ﲜﺴﻢ ﺃﻭﺗﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺌﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺮﺑﲔ‬

‫‪5‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﳒﻠﻮ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪1990 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،3‬ﺹ ‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ‪1979 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪67‬‬
‫‪20‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻠﻢ ﺟﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﻊ‬

‫ﰱ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﺃﲪﺪ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ "‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻫﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﻢ ﰱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ‬

‫ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ‪".‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻬﻮ" ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﲰﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻰ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ"‪8،‬ﺃﻭ"‬

‫ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ"‪ 9،‬ﺃﻭ "ﻫﻮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ‬

‫‪7‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‪1991 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪20‬‬
‫‪8‬ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪1979 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،2‬ﺹ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺃﻳﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪133‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪21‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪".‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱏ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ ﲣﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﰒ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱏ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﱏ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺃﻗﺴﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺫﻫﺐ ﺳﻴﺒﻮﻳﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ "ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪".‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ‬

‫‪10‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪8‬‬

‫‪ 11‬ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪51‬‬
 ‫‪22‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﺃﻯ ﺃﲪﺪ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫‪12‬‬
‫ﲬﺴﺔ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱃ‪:‬‬

‫◌◌ٍ‪(short vowels‬‬
‫) ٍ‬ ‫ﺃ(‪ .‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬

‫)‪(long vowels‬‬ ‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬

‫)‪(semi vowels‬‬ ‫ﺝ(‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﻷﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻞ‬

‫)‪(consonant‬‬ ‫ﺩ(‪ .‬ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﻛﲔ‬

‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬

‫‪i‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪ُ--‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ī‬أو ‪ii‬‬
‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻳﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺪ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ŭ‬ﺃﻭ ‪uu‬‬
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻭﺍﻭ ﺍﳌﺪ(‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭ ‪ a‬أو ‪aa‬‬
‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻷﻟﻒ(‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪12‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪313‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪..‬‬ ‫‪13‬ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫‪23‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻞ ‪7‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫?‬
‫ﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻤﺰﻩ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺏ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺕ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫ﺙ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺝ‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ħ‬‬
‫ﺡ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺍﳊﺎﺀ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺥ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺩ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫‪ð‬‬
‫ﺫ‬ ‫‪ 17‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺭ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﺯ‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺱ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬
‫∫‬
‫ﺵ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﺍﻟﺸﲔ‬
‫‪ş‬‬
‫ﺹ‬ ‫‪ 22‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺽ‬ ‫‪ 23‬ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ţ‬‬
‫ﻁ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ð‬‬
‫ﻅ‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻉ‬ ‫‪ 26‬ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﻍ‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬
‫‪24‬‬

‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻑ‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫ﻕ‬ ‫‪ 29‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻙ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻝ‬ ‫‪ 31‬ﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ļ‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 33‬ﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻥ‬ ‫‪ 34‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﻫـ‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﺍﳍﺎﺀ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ﺻﻮﺍﺋﺖ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻮﺍﻣﺖ‬

‫ﺃ(‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺍﺋﺖ‬

‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺍﺋﺖ "ﺻﻮﺕ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺮ ﺣﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻃﻠﻴﻘﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻒ ﰱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺃﻯ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺿﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺙ‬

‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﺎ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺎ‪".‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺍﺋﺖ ﻗﻴﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳎﻬﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﲑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻞ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﳎﺮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﳍ ﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﲑ ﰱ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﲑ ﳍﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺍﻣﺖ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺍﺋﺖ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗﺰﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ "ﻳﻨﺤﺒﺲ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺍﳓﺒﺎﺳﺎ ﳏﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻪ ﲟﺮﻭﺭﳊﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ‬

‫‪14‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪)،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ‪1990 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪74‬‬
‫‪26‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﳎﺮﺍﻩ ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ‬

‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻔﻴﻒ‪"،‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﰱ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﲑ ﰱ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪26‬‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫ﰒ ﺗﺰﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺖ ﻓﻬﻰ‬

‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱏ‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺮﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﻫﻰ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﲔ‬ ‫)‪(Bi-labial‬‬ ‫ﺃ(‪ .‬ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻀﻤﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﳍﻤﺎ ﰱ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ )‪ : (Labio-dental‬ﻫﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺎ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫‪17‬ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺹ ‪111 -110‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫ﺝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ )‪ : (Dental‬ﻣﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ھ(‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ )‪ : (Denti-alveolar‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ(‪ .‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ )‪ : (Alveolar‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫)‪(Palatal‬‬ ‫ﺯ(‪ .‬ﻏﺎﺭﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺭ )ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻳﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻏﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻪ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‪.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫)‪(Velar‬‬ ‫ﺡ(‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻘﻰ‬

‫)ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﰱ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁ(‪ .‬ﳍﻮﻯ )‪ : (Uvular‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻬﺎﺓ )ﻭﻫﻰ‬

‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﰱ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬

‫ﳍﻮﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬

‫ﻱ(‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﻰ )‪ : (Pharyngal‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ‪،‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻙ(‪ .‬ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻯ )‪ : (Glottal‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﰱ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﰱ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﰱ ﳐﺮﺝ‬

‫ﻣﺎ )ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ( ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻣﻪ )ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ( ﻭﲢﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﲢﺮﻛﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻗﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃ(‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺒﺤﺲ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﺣﺒﺴﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﳊﺒﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰒ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺳﺮﺍﺡ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻓﻴﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪18".‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪1999 ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪128‬‬
‫‪31‬‬

‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻻ ﻳﻨﺤﺒﺲ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳓﺒﺎﺳﺎ‬

‫ﳏﻜﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﺮﺍﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺝ ﺿﻴﻘﺎ ﺟﺪﺍ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻴﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﰱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻩ ﲟﺨﺮﺝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳛﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻔﻴﻒ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬

‫ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻴﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ‪19".‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻫﻰ "ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﻨﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻤﺮ ﰱ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﰒ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻔﻴﻒ‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﻉ‪".‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪23‬‬

‫‪20‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪125‬‬
‫‪32‬‬

‫ﺩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻰ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻄﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻦ‪21".‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ھ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ‪22".‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ(‪ .‬ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﰱ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﲤﻨﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﱮ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ‪23".‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬

‫‪21‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪128‬‬

‫‪22‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪129‬‬
‫‪23‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪33‬‬

‫ﺯ(‪ .‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺍﺋﺖ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ "ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﺟﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺰﻻﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﻬﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﺇﺫ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﱪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‬

‫ﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﳑﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪24".‬ﻭﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺸﺒﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﰱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭ‪‬ﻟﹶﺪ‪‬‬

‫ﻭﻳ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﻙ‪.‬‬

‫ﺡ(‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻬﺘﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻯ‬ ‫"ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ‪25".‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬

‫‪24‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪132‬‬

‫‪25‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪20‬‬
‫‪34‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﰒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺱ" ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻻ ﻳﻬﺘﺰ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﻻ‬

‫ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺭﻧﲔ ﺣﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪26".‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻙ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪26‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪35‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻭﺃﺭﺁﺋﻬﻤﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺷﺘﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬

‫‪Gennaius‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﱃ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﲰﻪ ﺟﲎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪27.‬ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﺟﲎ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺿﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﰱ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﱏ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﱘ ﻭﻧﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﻭﻋﺒﻘﺮﻯ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﻭﳐﻠﺺ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺧﻮﻥ ﰱ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻩ‪" ،‬ﻓﻘﻴﻞ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫ﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﲦﺎﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﻼﲦﺎﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﻷﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﺮﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺮ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻞ ﺇﻥ ﻭﻻﺩﺗﻪ ﰱ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ ﺣﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﱃ ﺑﻨﻮ ﺑﻮﻳﻪ‬

‫‪27‬ﺷﻮﻗﻰ ﺿﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮﻳﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪265‬‬

‫‪28‬ﺭﺣﺎﺏ ﺣﻀﺮ ﻋﻜﺎﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﻗﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻘﻪ‪) ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪96‬‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪334‬ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺃﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﺤﺐ ﺃﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﰱ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪388‬ﻫـ‪".‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﻮﺍ ﰱ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻗﻴﻞ‪" :‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺒﻐﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫ﻟﻴﻠﺘﲔ ﺑﻘﻴﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪392‬ﻫـ ﰱ ﺧﻼﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﰱ ﺳﻨﺔ‬

‫‪372‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﻴﺨﻪ ﺃﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﰱ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪377‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺎﺵ ﺍﺑﻦ‬

‫ﺟﲎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻴﺨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﰱ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪393‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﰱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﰱ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪392‬ﻫـ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﻻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﻼﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﺃﺩﺑﺎﺀ ﻓﻀﻼﺀ‬

‫ﺧﺮﺟﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﻦ ﺧﻮﻃﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﰱ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺴﲎ ﺍﳋﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﻮﺥ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻓﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ‬

‫‪29‬ﺣﺴﻦ ﻫﻨﺪﺍﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ‪) ،‬ﺩﻣﺸﻖ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ( ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪8‬‬

‫‪30‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪37‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻔﺶ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﺑﻜﺮ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﺑﻦ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻌﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﻬﺎﱏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﺑﻜﺮ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻫﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻳﺎﱏ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ "ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺒﻮﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﺍﺩﺭ ﺃﰉ ﺯﻳﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻸﺧﻔﺶ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻷﰊ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺯﱏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﻻﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‬

‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻤﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻻﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﲑ ﺃﰉ ﻋﻠﻰ‪".‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻨﻒ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺣﻮﺍﱃ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﲔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻏﻔﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﺬﻟﻴﲔ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﺯﱏ )ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻒ( ﻭﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﺯﱏ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪31‬ﺭﺣﺎﺏ ﺣﻀﺮ ﻋﻜﺎﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪97‬‬

‫‪32‬ﺣﺴﻦ ﻫﻨﺪﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪10‬‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﺃﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﺷﻌﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﺭﺁﺀ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ‪" :‬ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍ ﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬

‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪".‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺰﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪33‬ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻖ ﺣﺴﻦ ﻫﻨﺪﺍﻭﻯ‪) ،‬ﺩﻣﺸﻖ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ( ﺩﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪45‬‬
‫‪39‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻫﺐ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ(‪ -‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺏ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺝ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺩ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬

‫ھ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬

‫ﻭ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺯ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺱ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺡ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺏ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬

‫‪34‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪46‬‬

‫‪40‬‬

‫ﻁ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻱ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﰱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻻﳓﺮﺍﻓﻪ‬

‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻙ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻝ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬

‫ﻡ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻥ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺱ(‪ -‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﲔ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‬

‫ﻉ(‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻓﻬﻰ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻔﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ‬

‫ﺍﳉﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﺎﻭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬

‫ﺃ(‪ -‬ﺍﳉﻬﺮ‬

‫ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻤﻌﲎ ﺍﳉﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ "ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﺷﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﰱ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺣﱴ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻭﳚﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪35".‬ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺒﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬

‫ﰱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﲑﻩ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ(‪ -‬ﺍﳍﻤﺲ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪35‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪60‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳍﻤﺲ "ﻓﺤﺮﻑ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺟﺮﻯ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ‪36".‬ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﰱ ﳎﺮﺍﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ(‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ "ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺮﻱ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻪ"‪37.‬ﻭﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﳓﺒﺎﺱ ﰱ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﳊﻈﺔ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﳏﻜﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ(‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮﺓ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﲎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮ ﻓﻬﻮ "ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﳚﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‪38.‬ﻭﰱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ‬

‫‪36‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪37‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪61‬‬
‫‪38‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪43‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻏﲑ ﳏﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﳑﺮ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬

‫ﺑﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ھ(‪ -‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮ‬

‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﻮﺓ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ(‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺒﺎﻕ "ﺃﻥ‬

‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻟﺴﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﺯ(‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺡ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ‬

‫ﻭﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ "ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺠﺎﰱ‬

‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ‬

‫‪39‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪44‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻴﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺘﲔ ﻭﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻳﻘﻬﻤﺎ‪"40.‬ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺮﻑ‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻘﻮﻟﻪ"ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺭﺃﻳﺖ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﻳﺮ‪ 41".‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﻓﺎﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻐﻨﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳜﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪40‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪63‬‬

‫‪41‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
45
‫‪46‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‬

‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺪ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1921‬ﻡ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﺓ ﳏﻠﺔ ﺩﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺳﻮﻕ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﳏﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﳌﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﻭﺟﻮ‪‬ﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘ‪‬ﺎﺏ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻖ ﲟﻌﻬﺪ ﺩﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﲎ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺮﻯ‬

‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻃﻨﻄﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1946‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺑﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱃ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻤﲔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1948‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1953‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪(25-10-2007), (6.21PM)42 http://www.alfaseeh.com‬‬

‫‪Arabicacademy.org.eg (25-10-2007), (6.21 PM)43‬‬
‫‪http:// www.scc.gov.e(25-10-2007) (6.21 PM)44‬‬
‫‪47‬‬

‫ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1956‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺗﺪﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻔﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1948‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻣﺪﺭﺱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1962-1956‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰒ ﺃﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﺑﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1970-1963‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1969‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .5‬ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﰒ ﻋﻤﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1975-1972‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﲟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1985‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻵﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪‬ﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪2001‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰱ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪word and their uses‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪48‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻰ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﲝﻮﺛﻪ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱴ ﺃﻟﻘﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﰱ ﻣﺆﲤﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻦ ﺃﲪﺪ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺮ ﰱ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻟﻴﺎﺕ ‪1973‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﳏﺎﺿﺮﺍﺕ ﰱ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺴﺮﻱ )ﺩﻱ ﺳﻮﺳﲑ(‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻧﺸﺮ ﲟﺠﻠﺔ ﳎﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1973‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﻴﺬ ﰱ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻧﺸﺮﺗﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬

‫ﲝﻮﺙ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲟﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1974‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﰱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻃﻼﺏ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺞ ﻧﺸﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﲝﻮﺙ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1979‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﲝﻮﺙ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﰱ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺣﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰱ"‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﺋﺰ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﲰﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﺋﺰﺓ ﺻﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﲔ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1987‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1989‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﺋﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪1991‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺃﺭﺁﺋﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﺭﺁﺀ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻓﻬﻰ ﳘﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‬

‫‪45‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫‪1990‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺩ ﻁ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪63‬‬
‫‪50‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ )ﰱ ﳓﻮ ﻭﻟﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ )ﰱ ﳓﻮ‬

‫ﻳﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺃﻭ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ) َ‪( -ُ -ِ-‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﰱ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻝ )= ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﰱ‬

‫ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺿﻰ )=ﻛﺴﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﰱ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻋﻮ )= ﺿﻤﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‬

‫‪ -2‬ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺃ(‪ .‬ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﻘﻒ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﻭﻗﻮﻓﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﲔ ﺇﺫ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪،‬‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬

‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻗﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﺤﺒﺲ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺣﺒﺴﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﲔ‬

‫)ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ‬

‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻴﻢ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳌﻴﻢ ﺇﺫﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬

‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ‬

‫‪46‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪101‬‬

‫‪47‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪130‬‬
‫‪52‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬

‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﺷﻔﻮﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺑﲔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺿﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﻭﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ "ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺜﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬

‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﰱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻝ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪48‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪118‬‬

‫‪49‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪50‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪119‬‬
‫‪53‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﻩ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﻃﺒﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺨﻴﻢ(‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ(‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﻘﻒ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻗﻮﻓﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬

‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺗﺎﺭﻛﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ‪-‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ "ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬

‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪".‬‬

‫‪51‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪52‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪102‬‬
‫‪54‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ‪-‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ "ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬

‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ )ﻣﻔﺨﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻻ ﺇﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻴﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﱏ‪-‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ "ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﲑ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻏﲑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﻳﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻰ‬

‫‪54‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻖ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ‪-‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ "ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﰱ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﲤﻨﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ‪،‬‬

‫‪53‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪104‬‬

‫‪54‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪102‬‬
‫‪55‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﱯ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ‪،‬‬

‫‪55‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻼﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ‪-‬ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﱮ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪56‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ھ(‪ .‬ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍ‬

‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ‪... ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬ﻥﻓﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪129‬‬

‫‪56‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪130‬‬
‫‪57‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪129‬‬
‫‪56‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ‬

‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺣﱴ ﳝﻨﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪،‬‬

‫‪58‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺴﲔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬

‫ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃﺒﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺨﻴﻢ( ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﺟﻮﻋﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫و(‪ .‬ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ – ﺣﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‬

‫‪58‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪120‬‬

‫‪59‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪،‬‬
‫‪57‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻡ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﳏﺘﺠﺰﺍ ﻭﺭﺍﺀﻩ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ‪،‬‬

‫ﰒ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰱ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪-‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻓﻴﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﺎ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ‬

‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳉﻴﻢ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ )ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ(‬

‫ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ "ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﲟﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﻘﺬ ﺿﻴﻖ ﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﲔ‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﰱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪60‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪125‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬

‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﺸﲔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳓﻮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺴﺪ‬

‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ( ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺡ(‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،‬‬

‫ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﻭﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺿﻴﻖ‬

‫‪61‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪120‬‬

‫‪62‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪133‬‬
‫‪59‬‬

‫ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬

‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ" ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪".‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﲔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺪ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﰒ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﳌﺪﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺳﺮﺍﺡ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻰ ﻓﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ‬

‫ﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻀﻢ‬

‫‪63‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪120‬‬

‫‪64‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‬

‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ‪".‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁ(‪ .‬ﳍﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ "ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﱴ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻬﺎﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺳﺮﺍﺡ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺄﻥ ﳜﻔﺾ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻓﻴﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪".‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳍﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻱ(‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻰ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳛﺪﺙ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‬

‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪".‬‬

‫‪65‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪133‬‬

‫‪66‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪109‬‬
‫‪67‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪121‬‬
‫‪61‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳊﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ "ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﲑ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬

‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﺀ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳊﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻙ(‪ .‬ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ "ﺗﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‬

‫‪‬ﻤﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻗﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬

‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﻨﻔﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬

‫‪69‬‬
‫ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻻ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﻭﻻ ﻫﻮ‬

‫ﺑﺎ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫)ﻛﺎﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻭﳝﺮ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬

‫‪68‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪69‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪112‬‬
‫‪62‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﳝﺮ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﻭﻻﺗﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪".‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﳍﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬
‫ﺃ(‪ -‬ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻻﻳﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ(‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪70‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪122‬‬

‫‪63‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﳛﺒﺲ ﳎﺮ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﺣﺒﺴﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺻﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺒﺲ‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰒ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺳﺮﺍﺡ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻰ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪71‬‬
‫ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﳏﺪﺛﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪".‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﳎﺮﻯ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺘﲔ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻪ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪72‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺎ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺎ‪".‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ھ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬

‫‪71‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪100‬‬

‫‪72‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪118‬‬
‫‪64‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺄﻥ ﳚﻤﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ"‪73‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯ(‪ .‬ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱮ "ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﰱ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﲤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﱯ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ‪74".‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱮ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺡ(‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫‪73‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪129‬‬

‫‪74‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪65‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ " ﺑﺄﻥ ﳛﺒﺲ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺣﺒﺴﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﰱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳜﻔﺺ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﲔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻒ‪ 75".‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁ( ﺃﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﱴ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬

‫ﻭﰱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﳘﺎ‬ ‫‪76‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪".‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻱ( ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﺟﻮﻋﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪75‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪130‬‬

‫‪76‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪66‬‬

‫ﻙ(‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻰ‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪67‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‬
‫ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺳﺮ‬

‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ" ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫"ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ" ﻭﺟﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‬
‫‪68‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻬﻰ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﳘﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ )ﰱ ﳓﻮ ﻭﻟﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ )ﰱ ﳓﻮ ﻳﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﰒ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﰱ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻝ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﰱ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺿﻲ )ﻛﺴﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﰱ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻋﻮ‬

‫)ﺿﻤﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬

‫ﱂ ﻳﻌﺘﱪﻩ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪69‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴ ﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﱂ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﺑﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺑﻦ‬
‫ﺟﲎ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﳐﺮﺟﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺱ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻓﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﰱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻻﳓﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -12‬ﳑﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -13‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪71‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -15‬ﳑﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﲔ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -16‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺸﺮ ﳐﺮﺟﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺷﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻟﺜﻮﻳﺔ – ﺣﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﳍﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺣﻠﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﰱ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﳐﺮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺇﺫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬

‫ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪73‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﳐﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺱ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﳐﺮﺟﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻯ ﺃﺩﱏ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﳐﺮﺟﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺎﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ‬

‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺼﻒ‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻨﺠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﰱ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪74‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﳘﺎ‬

‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﱴ ﲤﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‬
‫ﰱ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﲢﺮﻛﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﰱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ‬

‫ﰱ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪75‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪76‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱮ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻒ ﻭﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﰱ ﻣﻬﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻘﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪78‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱴ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﳋﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻷﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﳐﺮﺟﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﺋﺖ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ‬

‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻻ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪79‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪-5‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ‬

‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ‬ ‫‪-6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪80‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ‬ ‫‪-7‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-9‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻣﻔﺨﻢ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺨﻢ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬

‫‪ -11‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -12‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬
‫ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -13‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳍﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳍﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺣﻨﻜﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﱮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﱮ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪82‬‬

‫‪ -15‬ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -16‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﱏ ﻟﺜﻮﻯ ﺃﻧﻔﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -17‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﻔﻮﻯ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -18‬ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻨﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬

‫‪ -19‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻰ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﰱ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﻨﻚ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺴﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪84‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ‬

‫ﺍﳋﺎﲤﺔ‬

‫أ‪ -‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺳﺮ‬

‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺏ" ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ" ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﰱ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﰱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﰱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺎ ﲰﻌﻪ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ ﰱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻄﻖ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﱂ ﻳﺼﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻫﻢ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺗﺐ ﻧﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﺗﺔ ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ "ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺏ"‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﺗﻪ‬

‫ﰱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ "ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﰱ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮﱂ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺘﺔ ﺑﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪86‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﳐﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﻰ‬ ‫‪-9‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻯ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -11‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﻣﻬﻤﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -12‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -13‬ﻭﺍﺗﻔﻘﺎ ﰱ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ‬

‫‪87‬‬

‫‪ -15‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﺍﳉﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -16‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﰱ ﳎﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﳍﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻬﻤﻮﺳﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻴﻪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ‬

‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﰱ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﺤﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻤﻠﻮﺍ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰱ ﺃﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﳐﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻯ ﰱ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﷲ ﺃﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫‪88‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫أ‪-‬‬

‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﳒﻠﻮ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪1990،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﲎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺍﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1‬ﺝ‪.1‬ﺩﻣﺸﻖ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪1985 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ --------‬ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،2‬ﺝ‪ .1‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪1952 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻮﻃﻰ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺎ ﺳﻮﺗﻴﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ .1‬ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ‪2002 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﲪﺪ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫‪1991‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ --------‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬

‫‪1978‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬

‫ﲤﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ .2‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪1989‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ --------‬ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪1979‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺣﺎﺏ ﺣﻀﺮ ﻋﻜﺎﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﻗﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪،‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .3‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪1993 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﳒﻰ‪1998 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻮﻗﻰ ﺿﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪1968 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺃﻳﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺒﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻗﻨﱪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،2‬ﺝ‪ .4‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪1982 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﺎﺏ‪1990 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪90‬‬

‫ﳏﻤﺪ ﻃﻨﻄﺎﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺄﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰉ‪1999 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻬﻤﻰ ﺣﺠﺎﺯﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪1979‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
91

‫ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬-‫ﺏ‬
Nasution, Ahmad Sayuti Anshari,. Bunyi Bahasa.
Jakarta: UIN Jakarta Press, 2006.
Artikel diakses pada Tanggal 25-10-2007 Jam 18:21.
Dari : http://www.alfaseeh.com
Artikel diakses pada tanggal 25-10-2007 jam 18:30
dari: Arabicacademy.org.eg
Artikel ini diakses pada tanggal 25-10-2007 jam 18:30
dari: http://www.scc.gov.e.